Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. 1 . You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. Finally.

2 .

Add more detailed modelling elements. electrical. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. and piping. such as mechanical equipment. such as duct. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. 3 . electrical panels. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. and plumbing engineering workflows. fixtures. and plumbing fixtures. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Germany. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. Add basic MEP elements. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical.

templates. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Create schedules. NOTE Depending on your installation. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. However. You do not design entire systems. you can choose to save your work. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. annotations. Metric file names have an _m suffix. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. as well as how to open and save them. When you open a training file. Create detail views. such as templates and families. After completing each exercise. For example. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. to provide a richer and more finished design. however. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. your Training folder may be in a different location. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. views. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. On the Contents tab. and sheets to document the project. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. So. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. you learn where the training files are located. When you install the training files as instructed. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . In this exercise. is located and accessed in the training files location. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. For example. Contact your CAD manager for more information. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. and tags. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. when you add ductwork.

Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. a list of file types displays. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. click ➤ Save As. scroll down. and click Save. 4 Click the training file name.rvt and make changes. For Files of type.rvt) is selected. For File name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. verify that Project Files (*. enter the new file name. For example. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. 8 If you have made changes. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. and click the Training Files icon. and you can open any supported file type. if you open settings. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. 3 In the right pane. the Open dialog displays. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. Accessing Training Files | 5 . You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. and click Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Imperial or Metric.rvt. you are prompted to save the changes. You may close the file with or without saving changes. select the folder in which to save the new file. depending on the instructions in the tutorial.

6 .

In this case. sections. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. 2D and 3D view. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. and phases when you need it. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. As you work in drawing and schedule views. every drawing sheet. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the hierarchy of elements. the parameter is one of association or connection. the door retains this relationship to the partition. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. ■ ■ 7 . schedules. and schedules required for a building project. the floor or roof remains connected. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. You learn the terminology. hence. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the operation of the software is parametric. If you move the partition. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. drawing sheets. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. In the Revit MEP model. If the length of the elevation is changed. scope. and plans. In this case.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. drawings. quantities. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design.

boilers. For example. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. filled regions. and keynotes are annotation elements. dimensions. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. tags. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. ducts. ducts. tags. sprinklers. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. dimensions. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. They help to describe or document the design. and electrical panels. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and electrical panels. sinks. For example. For example. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They display in relevant views of the design. boilers. Examples include detail lines. sprinklers. and reference planes are datum elements. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. When you change something. sinks. For example. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. For example. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. grids. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. walls and ceilings are hosts. levels. Datum elements help to define project context. For example. and 2D detail components.

Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. This information includes components used to design the model. floors. Project: In Revit MEP. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. elevation views. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Often. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. In Revit MEP. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. for example. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. Most often. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. top of wall. programming is not required. To place levels. views of the project. families. and drawings of the design. By using a single project file. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. section views. and so forth). Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. you can explicitly control them. For example. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. If you can draw.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. schedules. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. North . and types. from geometry to construction data. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. first floor. or bottom of foundation. and ceilings. The project file contains all information for the building design. In other cases. However. such as roofs. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. you do nothing to establish these relationships. you must be in a section or elevation view. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building.

and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. With a few clicks. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. pipes. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. and similar graphical representation. System families include ducts. For example. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. For example. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. System families can be transferred between projects. each in-place family contains only a single type. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Unlike system and standard component families. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. hiding. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. and wires. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. However. You can also display several project views at one time. such as a A0 title block. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. showing. A type can also be a style. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. Then experiment with them. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. A type can be a specific size of a family. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. Type: Each family can have several types. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. or layer the views to see only the one on top. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). identical use.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. For example. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects.

Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. To return the panel to the ribbon. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab.

many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. and settings. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. and CAD files. tools used for editing existing elements. tools used for running analysis on the current design.. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. data and systems. select the tool first. When working on the Modify tab. architect-specific tools. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. and for switching views. then select what you want to modify. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for.. project and system parameters.

an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. By default. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. when adding duct. provides requested information. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. For example. closes the application menu (double-click). To keep a panel expanded. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). displays frequently used tools. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. provides access to common tools. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command.

(New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. select a template and create a new drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. such as Export and Publish.. (Open) save the current drawing.. select a file to open.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Export) On the application menu... Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. click. (Save As) export the current drawing. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name.

(Licensing) close the file.. and Walkthrough. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. publish the current project. family. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. or template file. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. but is not enabled by default. (Publish) print the current drawing. annotation. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. (Print) access product and license information.On the application menu. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. or template file. provides views including Default 3D.. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 .. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. To enable or disable a tool item. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar.. family. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. to. click. saves a current project. Camera. annotation.

displaying the same information. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Group. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. To hide the Status Bar. Clear the Status Bar check mark. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. check the Status Bar. However. Starting with the most recent command. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. When you are using a command. repeat the command. Modify. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . In addition. When you are highlighting an element or component. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. This displays the command history in a list. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. when you switch to another editing mode. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down.To undo or redo a series of operations. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. or the Family Editor. workshared components. Clipboard. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. To show the Status Bar again.

View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Place a Wall. select one or more elements of the same category. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool.To cancel or exit the current command. When you place an element in a drawing. To change existing elements to a different type. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . click (Modify). It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. for example. On the Quick Access toolbar.

After you are familiar with these tasks. Zoom the view In the tutorials. click Training Files. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. There are several ways to access zoom options. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. In the following steps.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options.rvt. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. For example. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. 1 Click ➤ Open.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.

4 Click Zoom Out (2x). If you do not have a wheel mouse. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. In the drawing area. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. this is referred to as a crossing selection. click . on the Navigation bar. 6 Click in the drawing area. 9 To display SteeringWheels. When you release the mouse button. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. the view zooms in on the selected area. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. Modifying the View | 19 .NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. To modify or add snap increments. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 5 Click Zoom To Fit.

➤ Options. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and click tin the Options dialog. Click and drag to orbit the design. As you move the mouse. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. For more information about SteeringWheels. 14 To exit the wheel. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and then using the Zoom tool again. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . press ESC. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. click the SteeringWheels tab. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. moving the wheel to the desired location. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed.

When drawing or modifying an MEP design. Similar controls. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. After you are familiar with these tasks.Design ➤ Floor Plans. These are the drag controls. 3 Click and drag the bottom control.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. Small blue dots. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials.HVAC Plan . 2 Enter ZR. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . and open Level 2 . display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view.Design. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. display along the ends. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. as shown. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. referred to as shape handles. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. called drag controls. and select the duct. bottoms. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.

click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. on the Standard toolbar.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. select the first item in the list. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. In this example. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. click the Undo command. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Move. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. All changes you make to a project are tracked. 6 On the Undo menu. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. or press CTRL+Z. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command.

and click again to specify the ending position. as shown. such as Move and Copy. 11 With the duct already selected. and drag it to the left as shown. click to specify the starting position. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. you want to move the duct. In this case. The duct is moved to the new position. After selecting the element to move. 10 Move the cursor to the right.Some commands. for example. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . 9 Click the midpoint of the duct.

Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways.Return. Select Mechanical . under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Press ESC twice. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar.Supply. 14 Enter VG. 13 To end a command. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. such as the Modify Ducts command. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. For example.End a command Some commands. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Click OK. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

create and manage views. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and open Metric ➤ Templates. 2 In the New Project dialog. select Project. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). You can either select a template from the template library. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. such as ducts and pipes. system families. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. You can choose from several templates. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. use copy/monitor. and modify system settings. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. settings. the default building levels and standard views. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. click Browse. such as coordination review and interference checking. 5 In the New Project dialog. and open North. New projects inherit all the families. under Template file. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. click Training files. 7 In the Project Browser. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. link files. and click Open.rte template. you learn how to start a project from a template. Finally. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. and geometry from the starting template. 27 . such as the default project units and settings. under Create new. In that case. 6 Click OK. and loadable families.

15 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Browse. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. For example. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. select Manchester. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. you can select it now. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. NH. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Click OK. navigate to Metric Templates. select Project template. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 Using the same method. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. for City. select Level 1. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. ■ For Building Construction. When you select the material. select School or University. review the construction materials listed. click (Browse). Click OK twice. For Location. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. Click Cancel. (Browse). Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. under Energy Analysis. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . create another new project using the Construction template. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. If you want to use a template other than the default. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. ■ ■ Under Create new.8 In the drawing area. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type.rte template and click Open. for Energy Data. click Edit. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. In the Choose Template dialog.

clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 260.rfa and click Open. 25 In the left pane. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. click Round. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines.00 mm. 26 In the right pane. for 20.00 mm. click Rectangular. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. and 310. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. under Duct Settings. for 90. 290. and fire protection systems. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. click Wiring. piping. and demand factors for electrical systems. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. under Duct Settings. 23 In the left pane. power distribution systems. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 24 In the right pane. wiring. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. for 90. After standard settings have been established for an organization.00 mm.00 mm. 110. 27 Click OK. Creating an MEP Project | 29 .00 mm. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical.00 mm.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. select Identity Data. 33 Click OK. plumbing. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 140.000 mm. select Views. click Sizes. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected.00 mm. Click OK twice. under Pipe Settings. Holding CTRL. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. For Categories.00 mm. and 140. For Ground Wire Tick Mark.00 mm. 22 In the right pane. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 110.

select Family and Type. click Browse. select Associated Level. click Training. select View Name. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. select Project. 2 In the New Project dialog. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 5 Click OK. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. Notice that the file is saved as a template. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. select Auto . 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. For Then by. 38 Close the file. From the Positioning list. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. families. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. under Create new. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. Linking Projects In this exercise. Select Ascending Click OK twice.rvt. To enable this coordination. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project.Origin to Origin.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. 4 In the New Project dialog. select Sub-Discipline. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. Click Open. and groups that are contained in a project. under Template file. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. For Then by. sheets. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. In addition. For Sort by.

12 Click OK. select the linked architectural model. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. under Constraints. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. 8 If necessary. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. select Room Bounding. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Linking Projects | 31 .The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.Mech.

verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. click Plan View types.Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 17 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. click the level line for 03. 19 On the left side of the view.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. and the level 4. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. 29 In the drawing area. After copying. 34 On the Basics tab. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. and that the copied elements are monitored. a warning message displays. warnings notify you of any violations. highlight the linked model. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. and click to select the linked model. 27 In the drawing area. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. select Custom. click By Host View. indicating that a relationship is established. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. level 3.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. If you modify a monitored element. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. appears above the copied elements. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. click Custom. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. Linking Projects | 33 . click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. for the link file. indicating that an element has changed.

click Edit. Site. Under Visibility. for Name. enter Mechanical View and click OK. Select Show categories from all disciplines. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 36 Click OK. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. under View Properties. Click OK. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. and Topography.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. click Custom. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab. for the link file. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. deselect Levels. Planting. Roads. 3 In the View templates dialog. Click OK. deselect Parking. 2 In the New View Template dialog. select Custom. 7 Click OK twice. Under Visibility.

Modifying System Settings | 35 . click Training Files. they are not saved to project files or template files. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. click the Graphics tab. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click OK. 8 Click ➤ Options. click Browse. select Mechanical and click OK. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 3 Under Colors. and your username when using worksharing. 7 Click OK. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. click the Graphics tab. under View Templates. select Invert background color. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog. under Template file. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.rte. 9 In the Options dialog. notification preferences. journal cleanup options. selection default options. Notice that the drawing area is black. 5 In the New Project dialog. These settings control the graphics.

13 Under Notifications. 11 In the Color dialog. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 12 Click the General tab. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 2 In the Options dialog. and click OK. When an error occurs. 17 Press ESC to end the command. and family libraries. including your default project template. 18 Select the wall. family template files. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. For Tooltip assistance. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. select None. click the File Locations tab. you specify default file locations. However. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. select yellow. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. click the value for Selection color. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. the elements causing the error display using this color.10 Under Colors. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it. 14 Click OK. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. select One hour. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files.

Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. select the folder to save your files to by default. Specifying File Locations | 37 . you can start a new project with that template. Load. click Browse. 8 Click Cancel.3 Under Default template file. and Import dialogs. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. However. or loading a Revit MEP file. and click Open. Save. and you can create new libraries. centralized. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. This path is set automatically during the installation process. 7 In the Options dialog. click Places. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. under Default path for family template files. note the list of library names. click Browse. 10 In the Places dialog. saving. In the following illustration. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. Click and click Browse to select a template. ➤ New ➤ Project. such as in a large. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. You can modify the existing library names and path. click Browse. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. When you are opening. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 4 Click Cancel. TIP To view a template. 5 Under Default path for user files.

➤ Open. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click the My Library icon. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. click My Library. and click Open. or families. and Import dialogs. templates. and change the name to My Library. 15 Under Library Name. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. and click (Browse). and select it as the library path. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. Load.11 In the Places dialog. and click OK twice. Save. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Add Value).

4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. select Ignore words in uppercase. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. specify the new location here. enter sheetmtl-Cu. If you want to relocate this path. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. If you work in a large office. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. This path is determined during installation. 11 In the Options dialog. 19 Click Cancel. click Edit. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 3 Under Settings. 12 Create a new project using the default template.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click the Spelling tab. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 14 Click in the drawing area. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 22 Select My Library. 21 On the File Locations tab. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 23 Click 24 Click OK. click OK. 5 In the text editor. such as bump maps. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. click Edit. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 8 Under Building industry dictionary. custom color files. view the current path. 2 In the Options dialog. 27 Click OK. click Places. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 20 Click ➤ Options. and decal image files. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 9 In the text editor.

click OK. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 20 Under Settings. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 .17 In the Spelling dialog. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. under Dimension Snaps. click OK. You can turn snap settings on and off. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click Close. click Training Files. 19 In the Options dialog. click Browse. 24 In the Options dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 25 Close the file without saving it. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click Restore Defaults. you modify snap increments. 6 In the Snaps dialog. 23 In the text editor. In this exercise. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. work with snapping turned off. you modify snap settings. click File menu ➤ Save. 21 Under Personal dictionary. under Template file. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. delete sheetmtl-CU. 22 In the text editor. 4 In the New Project dialog. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 18 Click ➤ Options. 2 In the New Project dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor.rte. As you zoom in and out within a view. and enter 500 . This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click Edit.. click the Spelling tab.

you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. If it does not. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. deselect Chain. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. enter SM. zoom out until it does so. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. such as ZO to zoom out.7 Under Object Snaps. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. TIP To zoom while sketching. 8 In the Snaps dialog. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. If you do not have a wheel button. 10 On the Options Bar. While sketching. and move the cursor to the right. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. snapping reverts to the system default settings. For example. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. click OK. This is the increment that you added previously. use the wheel button on your mouse. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm.

it will snap to the endpoints. 19 Enter SM.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 26 Close the file. Notice that snapping is once again active. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. and the wall edges. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and move the cursor to the right.. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. the midpoint. 25 Click OK. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 22 Move the cursor downward. and delete the value 500 . Make sure you also delete the semicolon. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. with or without saving it. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and specify the wall endpoint. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Do not set the wall end point. If you move the cursor along the wall. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

44 .

The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. This system consists of a cooling tower.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. After applying a color scheme to the zones. At the end of the tutorial. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. methodology. and then you create a plenum level. duct system and a hydronic piping system. water source heat pump (WSHP). each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. 45 . you first configure the linked architectural model. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. By following the recommended workflow. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. However. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you design a mechanical system for an office building. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this lesson. you first plan the system. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design.autodesk. After finishing each exercise. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. you will understand the process. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. you can choose to save your work. go to http://www. In this exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present. As you create the mechanical system. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis.

make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. These components are defined in the architectural training file. Next.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. and double-click West . The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. you add a level for plenums. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. roof. ceilings. not in the MEP training file. click Training Files. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. indicating that it’s the active view.Space Plan is highlighted. 1 In the Project Browser. under Constraints. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. and after the linked model highlights. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. NOTE When working with a linked file.MEP. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. 6 In the Project Browser. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. select Room Bounding. In this section. click to select it. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. Preparing Spaces | 47 . and enter Level 2 Plenum. and click OK. 16 Press Esc. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. and click Properties. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. 9 On the Draw panel.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. enter 2600mm. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. Click Plan View Types. right-click Level 2 Plenum. and in the Plan View Types dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. For Offset. The new level is placed. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template).

■ Click OK twice. for Level. In this exercise. and then place spaces in various types of areas. select MEP . for Default View Template. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Plenum Plan. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. enter 0. you can choose to save your work. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. you place spaces in areas of the building model. enter an Offset of 300mm. Under View Depth. click Edit. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. right-click Level 2 Plenum. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. For Cut plane. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. However. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays.Plenum. for View Scale. 20 In the Project Browser. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In the next exercise. For View Classification. Under Extents. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . In this exercise. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. For Sub-Discipline. NOTE After finishing each exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. for View Range. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. and click Apply Default View Template. Under Identity Data. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. select Design. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. for Top. select Level Above (Level 3). and for Offset.

■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. click Training Files. select Horizontal. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. For (Tag Location). 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For Offset. For Upper Limit. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. enter 0. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. select Level 2 Plenum. Placing Spaces | 49 . 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and ceilings). 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Space.Space Plan is highlighted. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. walls.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. select New.

and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.7 Click to place the space. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. ensuring coordination between the files. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. For Name. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 14 In the drawing area. enter 219. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. enter Library. for Number. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 9 Select the space. Click OK.

Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For Upper Limit. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. For Offset.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. Placing Spaces | 51 . select Level 3. 21 Using the method learned previously. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. enter 0.

23 Click OK. and then split the space using a space separation line. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .22 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. you place a space in a large corridor area. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. under Energy Analysis.

2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. click Training Files. select Level 3. and then press Esc.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down.Space Plan is highlighted. and for Offset. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 .rvt. for Upper Limit. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. enter 0. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.

click in the name column. and scroll to the newly placed space. In the schedule.7 In the Project Browser. and select Corridor. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . which was numbered 219Q. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and change the space number to 216A. 9 In the schedule. 10 Click in the number column. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule.

Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 15 Press Esc twice. 11 Close the schedule view. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. as shown.

Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. place a space in the lower area of the split space.16 Using the method learned previously. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you place a space in a chase.

Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown.Space Plan is highlighted. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.rvt. If necessary. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).

for Upper Limit. right-click. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Interior and Reference. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. click in the chase area to place the space.4 Press Esc. expand Spaces. In the plan view. 10 In the plan view. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. select Level 3. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. for Upper Limit. For Offset. and then click OK. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. enter 0. 12 Click in the section view. 6 Enter VG. On the Options Bar. and click Element Properties. select Roof Level. select the space.

enter 1200. enter 225PC. for Name. 15 Press Esc. ceilings. 17 Type ZF. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. under Loaded Tags. and click OK. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 .Space Plan. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Bounding elements (such as walls. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. All spaces in the view are tagged. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume.■ For Limit Offset. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. floors. and maximize the view. Under Identity Data. enter Chase. For Number.

1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Zoning is highlighted. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. indicating that it’s the active view. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. click Reference. it is automatically added to the Default zone. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. which removes the space from the Default zone. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. To display space reference lines. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .20 Close the file with or without saving it. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. under Spaces. click Training Files. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. After a space is placed in an area.rvt. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click View ➤ Zones. In this exercise. In the next exercises. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.

and click OK. click Training Files. you assign spaces to zones in the building. and a new zone is created. indicating that it’s the active view.Zoning is highlighted. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. Next. select Occupiable. As you do this. The Zone tool is active. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . and verify the zones in the System Browser. click Reference. The graphic in the System Browser updates. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. double-click 121 Cafeteria. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. ) or 5 In the System Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. the Edit Zone tab displays.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 6 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. under Spaces. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. under Energy Analysis. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. To display space reference lines. you assign spaces to a zone. indicating that the space is occupiable.

select HVAC Zones. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). Instruction 221. and modify the zone properties. type VG. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Click OK. To view the zone in the drawing area. Instruction. you need to activate the zone visibility. select Computer Lab 222. and Electrical 220 spaces. 5 With the drawing area active. you can add or remove a space from the zone. Expand HVAC Zones. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click Finish Editing Zone. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. 4 In the drawing area. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. Using the Edit Zone tab.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). In the System Browser. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line.

you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted.West . 5 Click in the Level 1 . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.Zoning view to activate it. for Name. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. under Spaces. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. You activated zone visibility in the views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. and click OK.Zoning.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. indicating that it’s the active view. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. click Training Files. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To display space reference lines. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .West . verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). 11 Close the System Browser. and verify the zone in the System Browser. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. enter 2 . 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . click Reference. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building.TIP After you finish editing the zone. click Finish Editing Zone. under Identity Data. In this exercise.Area B. expand 2 . 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 9 In the System Browser.

15 Press Esc. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.Zoning view. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Verify that the distance is 12mm. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. Select Attached End. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning floor plan. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning view. zoom out. 8 In the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 . 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.

You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. and zone information. space. for Name Value. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. and click OK. on the ViewCube. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select 109 Lounge. verify that Wireframe is selected. click the corner where the Top. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. enter Lounge . and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. click Training Files. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . Front. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. In this exercise.East.Zoning to make it the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 .Zoning view. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. you verify the building. double-click the zone tag. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane).rvt.

All spaces in the zone display in isolation. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. ■ ■ On the Details tab. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Using the Highlight tool. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. you isolate the space. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. select 1_South_Area C. ■ Click (Highlight). click (Isolate).The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. With 109 Lounge selected. Next. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them.

verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. select Lounge/Recreation. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. This indicates the heating set point. This indicates the cooling set point. cooling air temperature. the zone information displays for the selected zone. click . verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. and in the People dialog. Below the list of spaces and zones. and click OK. For Electrical Loads. click .22 °C : N/A is specified. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary.33 °C : 12. For Cooling Information. For Heating Information. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. and then click OK. click (Shading). you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. Next. click . and humidification set point.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool.11 °C : 32. verify that <Building> is selected. For Construction Type. the space information displays for the selected space. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. and then click OK. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . and dehumidification set point. verify that 21. scroll down in the left pane. verify that <Building> is selected. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. Next. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. and air changes per hour. verify that 23. This indicates the outdoor air per person. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. outdoor air per area. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. ■ ■ ■ Next. heating air temperature. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. For People. Below the list of spaces and zones. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. select 109 Lounge.22 °C : N/A is specified.

Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. open MEP . 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 15 In the Project Browser. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. floors. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. For Offset.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. click Cancel. 12 Using the methods learned previously. select Level 3. roofs. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and other room-bounding components.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. enter 0. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume.

Click OK. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. and select space Plenum 212P. select Plenum. for Number. In this exercise. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 212P. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . Under Energy Analysis. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. you verified building. For Name. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. and verify that the space has replaced the void. select Plenum. and zone information. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. space. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. Because this is an unoccupied space. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Under Energy Analysis. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Modify space properties 19 Select the space.

after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. this option adjusts the times automatically. For Sliver Space Tolerance. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building.rvt.Space Plan. In order to select a space. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. If. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. For Project Phase. under Volume Computations. select space Library 219. NH. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. and click OK. Click OK twice. For Export Complexity. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. right-click. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that <Building> is specified. enter 03101. verify that Level 1 is selected. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that 300 is specified. click in the Value field. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). click Training Files. click Edit. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. for Energy Data. On the Place tab. double-click Level 2 . verify that Manchester. you need to select this option. for Building Service. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and click Element Properties. and click OK. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. under Energy Analysis. verify that New Construction is selected. For Building Construction. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. is selected. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. On the Weather tab. For Ground Plane. 8 In the drawing area. select School or University. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. for City. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. For Postal Code. For Location.

Audio Visual. click Edit. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. click in the Value column. Under Power. a cooling load. For Building Service. For Building Construction. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. click Edit. verify that School or University is selected. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. for Values. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. For People. for Values. both. For Latent. and enter 15 sq. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. enter 60 W. Select Area per person. For Sensible. and click OK. verify that Manchester. For Location. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. select Actual. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. m. select Specified. 12 Click the Details tab. select Heated and cooled. enter 45 W. and click to learn the cause for the warning.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. or neither. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. for Values. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . Click OK twice. Under Heat Gain (per Person). is specified. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. select Specified. select Library . verify that <Building> is specified. verify that Occupiable is selected. Next. For Condition Type. Click OK. NH. For Space Type. for Values. Select the space associated with the warning. You have verified the building information. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. select Actual. and then click .

20 In the Instance Properties dialog. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. click Calculate. 17 In the loads report. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. In this exercise. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . and under Heating Information. 16 After you review the loads report. space. There should be no warnings displayed. and can be modified here. select 219 Library. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. click Information). review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads.Space Plan. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. and zone information for the building model.11°C. select 219 Library. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 In the drawing area. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. and click OK. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. space. or make any changes to the model. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. or zone information. You should correct the space error in the building model. and a loads report displays. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. weather. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. 15 Review the loads report for project. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. 21 Click OK. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. under Energy Analysis. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed.

rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. Click OK. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Color Scheme. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. 5 Zoom in to the legend. click Training Files. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . in relatively small increments. click to the right of the building to place the legend. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. select HVAC Zones. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 In the drawing area.

select Cooling Load . 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. under Schemes.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. and click OK. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. select the color scheme legend. The new scheme displays in the view.Expanded Ranges. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . In the next exercise.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements.rvt. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. In this exercise. 11 Using the method learned previously. click Training Files. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m.

In the Fields dialog.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. select HVAC. select Air Flow. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. for Formula. Select Formula. Under Available fields. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. Click OK. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. and click OK. In the Calculated Value dialog. ■ Click Calculated Value. and then click . For Name. enter Space Airflow Schedule. select Spaces. select Spaces. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Calculated Supply Airflow. For Type. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. For Formula. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. for Select available fields from. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Space Fill is the active view. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. select New Construction.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK. enter Airflow Delta. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. For Discipline. more category options are available. Select Schedule building components. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . For Phase. enter . In the Schedule Properties dialog. click (Browse).

select red. select Airflow Delta. and then click Conditional Format. select Number. For Background Color.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. In the Color dialog. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. verify that Show is highlighted. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. and then select Hidden field. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. and click OK. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. For Fields. select Level. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . For Value. right-click to access schedule properties. select Level. Under Conditions to Use. Header. click the color swatch. select Not Between. and Blank line. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. Click OK twice. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. a view opens that contains the selected space. For Then by. ■ The schedule displays. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. Select Ascending. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel.

you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In the next lesson. 7 Close the file with or without saving it.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. In later exercises. In this exercise.

you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. After system creation. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. As you place the air terminals. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. 79 . and work with the airflow schedule. Then. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP).Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you will create supply air systems. After completing the air systems lesson. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you modify air terminal parameters. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. In this lesson.

rvt. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. click Training Files. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. When you highlight a space using the cursor.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the ceiling view.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and scroll to space 223. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . the space crossing lines display.

Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. the hosted elements are updated as well. 9 On the Placement panel. select the diffuser. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. click Place on Face. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . and then press Esc to end the command. verify that Constrain is cleared. 13 On the Options Bar. enter 215 L/s. and press Enter. The schedule updates with the new flow data. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. and press Enter. and select M_Supply Diffuser . for Flow. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. type 3600. and then select both Copy and Multiple. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. which in this case is the ceiling grid. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. If the host element is modified or moved. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. 17 Move the cursor down. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Also. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan.

rfa. and click Open.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. as shown. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 25 In the drawing area. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. click Place on Face.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 28 On the Placement tab. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. select one of the diffusers. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 21 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. and then press Esc. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. Next. As you place the return diffusers. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. 29 Place 2 diffusers. 22 In the drawing area. 24 In the Open dialog. click Yes.

press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and click OK. as shown. for Reference.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. click Yes. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . and click to select the lines. under Other. 31 In the alert dialog. 32 In the Project Browser. Level. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. select Strong Reference. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. select one of the return diffusers. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties.

and then press Esc twice. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. 43 Using the same method.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 40 In the drawing area. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. as shown. select the vertical grid line as shown. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. align the other return diffuser. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser.

Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. As you place the air terminals. clear LeftArrow. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. and on the Options Bar. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. right-click. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. and click Element Properties. under Mechanical. select both return diffusers. 47 Using the same method. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 310 L/s. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . and click OK. and press Enter. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise.44 While pressing Ctrl. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Flow.

for Scale. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. expand HVAC . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .rvt.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 10 In the drawing area. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. When you highlight a space using the cursor. the space crossing lines display. at the lower left corner of the building.200 Neck.Design to make it the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. verify that Tag on Placement is selected.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. click Training Files.HVAC Plan . 8 In the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select M_Supply Diffuser . 2 On the View Control Bar. and double-click Level 1 . and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 9 On the Options Bar. click 1 : 100.

12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level.Airflow. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Also.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. type 6000. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. As a result. 11 Select the diffuser. Click OK. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. enter 2400. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. under Constraints. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. for Offset. move the cursor down. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and then press Enter. enter 170 L/s. Under Mechanical . for Flow. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

18 On the Options Bar. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then press Esc. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.16 Using the same method.

and then right-click in the schedule. for Sort by. for Flow. under Available Fields. select 21. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. double-click System Type. tile the windows. under space 115. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. enter 210 L/s. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . Type. 27 In the schedule. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. select Mark. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). under Other. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. 29 Using the same method.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. For Category. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 25 Click OK 3 times. and click View Properties. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. for Embedded Schedule. type. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. it is a negative value. mark. Next. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. 26 Using the method learned previously. Mark. and Flow. select Air Terminals. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. and press Enter. click Edit.

The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. 31 In the drawing area. as shown. and maximize Level 1 . Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space.HVAC Plan . As you highlight the zone. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115.Design. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

43 W (approximately 1.Horizontal .32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. 33 Click OK. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space.Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. 36 In the drawing area. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . zoom and pan to the double door for space 115.3 times the heating load). verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955.High Efficiency . select M_WSHP .7-18 kW .97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 35 In the Type Selector. and under Energy Analysis.

Design is highlighted. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. As you add diffusers to systems. including energy analysis. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the space crossing lines display. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. In this exercise. After creating the logical connection. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. enter . 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. When you highlight a space. and click OK. for Constraints ➤ Offset. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. You then create the logical connection between the system components. right-click the title. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 6 Keep the System Browser open. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. However. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. and click View ➤ Systems. indicating that it’s the active view. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . IMPORTANT In the System Browser. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. 44 Zoom in to space 115. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. click Training Files. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .HVAC Plan .rvt. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. you also use the System Browser to validate systems.

8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. review the Number of Elements. On the Options Bar. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 12 In the System Browser.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 17 Using the method learned previously. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. the number of elements is updated. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. and the system connects them. and Flow value. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Connect Into. the air terminals are the children. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 15 Click Cancel. 11 In the drawing area. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . System Name. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 18 Click OK.

you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . which updates the name in the System Browser. for System Name. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. In this exercise. for Mark.Rename the system Next. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 25 Click OK. In this exercise. click Training Files. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. under Mechanical. 22 Click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. under Identity Data. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building.rvt.

When you highlight a space using the cursor. which provides various layout tools. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. select Network. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. enter 3000. 5 On the Options Bar.HVAC Plan. for Solution Type. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. For Offset. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. enter 3000. A Generate Layout tab displays. Also.Round. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select Flex Duct Round : Flex . indicating that it’s the active view. In this case. For Offset. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. the space crossing lines display. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . click Settings. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). For Duct Type. the Network type provides several solutions. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. For Flex Duct Type. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. and display solution 1. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the drawing area. For Duct Type. 7 On the Options Bar. select the upper left diffuser. Select Branch. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Either relocate the system components. or offset elevations are incorrect. as shown. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. click Modify. as is the elbow itself. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. Click OK. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and use the drag control to drag it to the left.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. you’ll get an error in a later step. enter 900. or manually modify the duct. select a different layout solution. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. 11 Click Finish Layout. For example. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork.

This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. a disconnection exists. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. and click to select it. fittings. and equipment. Usually. select Duct Color Fill . NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. If the entire network does not highlight. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . Using a flow-based color scheme. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. highlight a segment of the main duct.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend.Flow. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. and click OK. for Color Scheme. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. thus it is not part of the system. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. The first time you press Tab.

Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. but not all values are used in this view. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. and press Enter. under Mechanical . for Values Displayed. select one of the diffusers in the system. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s).Airflow. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. select the WSHP. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select By View. and then click OK. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. for Flow. under Graphics. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. 20 In the drawing area. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. and click OK. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and on the Options Bar.

select Calculated Size Only. select Duct Color Fill . If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. and then click to select it. for Schemes. and drag it to the right.65 Pa/m. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . select Friction. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Select Only. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. Click OK. and select 400. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. highlight a segment of the duct. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 26 Click OK. Select Restrict Height. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP).21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP.Velocity. click Cancel. and then press Esc to clear the selection. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. and enter . for Branch Sizing. select the color scheme legend. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Under Constraints. Select the upper segment of main duct. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity.

and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. pressure. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Using this tool. and pressure loss. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Use the information that displays (flow. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .The ductwork and fittings are updated. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). so that you can modify the system design accordingly. static pressure. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow.

also known as the critical path. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.NOTE As you inspect a system. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Training Files. 35 Click Finish. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure.

and click Draw Duct. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Design is highlighted. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and select the WSHP. indicating that it’s the active view. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. click the corner where the Top.3D MEP. Front. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. NOTE When drawing duct. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 15 On the ViewCube. enter 3000. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. double-click MEP . The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 11 On the Options Bar.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . for Offset. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . select the top right diffuser. right-click the connector grip. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. and click Draw Duct. 14 In the Project Browser.

select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . it is considered a closed loop. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. in space 115. The ductwork is automatically created.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 19 In the drawing area. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser.

connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 .22 Using the same method. You can ignore the warning. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. and select the top left diffuser. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 25 Press Esc.

Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 30 Press Esc twice. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. and then click Modify. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split.

Airflow. and click to select it. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. clear Restrict Height. for Flow. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click OK. under Mechanical . This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and click OK. 40 Using the same method. select a segment of the main duct. such as a plenum. under Constraints. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog.

108 .

109 . Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Create return and supply piping systems. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Then. In this lesson.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Automatically and manually lay out piping. you place mechanical equipment. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. on level 3 of the building model. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. including 2 base mounted pumps. and a cooling tower located on the roof. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. in corridor 328. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. click Training Files. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.rvt.Design is highlighted.Horizontal High Efficiency .Left Return . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select M_WSHP . 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .7-18kW .HVAC Plan . 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.

8 Click the corridor wall face. click the top edge of the WSHP. as shown. verify that Wall faces is selected. and click to place the dimension. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. click the dimension. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and enter 600.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 7 On the Options Bar. 10 Select the WSHP. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.

11 Press Enter and then press Esc. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the 2 WSHPs. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and in the Type Selector.) 14 Click Modify. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. as shown. verify that the WSHP is still selected.

20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Under Mechanical. 21 Click Modify. enter 0. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Offset.75 L/s. as shown. and click to place it in the mechanical room. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. for Water Flow. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Click OK. enter 2750.

A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. but without a corresponding system. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Unlike logical connections (systems). Create the logical connection between the system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise.22 Close the file with or without saving it. you create the return and supply piping systems. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. including flow and pressure. analyses cannot be performed. You can create pipes to connect system components. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation.

Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. 5 In the System Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window.rvt. and click View ➤ Piping. Assigning a system component to an existing system.HVAC Plan . It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Therefore. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area.Design is highlighted. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. As you assign equipment to systems. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select the 2 WSHPs. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. click Training Files. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return.Mech 330). indicating that it’s the active view. This display indicates that the system is selected. while pressing Ctrl. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. Creating a Piping System | 115 . This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. right-click the Systems column heading. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. where it is easier to review the information. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the System Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

(You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 12 In the drawing area.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Notice that on the Options Bar. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 17 On the Options Bar. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. select the boiler. for System Name. 13 Click Finish Editing System. 10 On the Options Bar. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. for System Name. and the Edit System tool is not active.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. You have created the hydronic return system. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.

19 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Select Connector dialog. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. double-click Roof .18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and bypasses the cooling tower. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system.HVAC Plan . and select the cooling tower. In cooling mode. under Design ➤ HVAC . 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Creating a Piping System | 117 . IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 23 Close the roof plan view. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. the boiler supplies heated water to the system.Design. 25 Select the boiler. In heating mode. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return).

You also manually modify the layout path as required. enter 0. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. and click OK. In the System Browser. and click OK. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. and click Select. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 29 Right-click CHWS. 28 Using the same method. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. 32 In the System Browser. you can view several parameters. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. and click Expand All. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. under Mechanical. expand Piping. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. indicating the logical connection. and click Properties. including the flow rate and size of the component. for Water Flow. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Column Settings. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog.8. expand the Hydronic Return system category. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children).

click Check None. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. 5 In the Filter dialog. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.HVAC Plan . click Training Files. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . the boiler. select Mechanical Equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A system preview displays in red.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Mech 330). 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click OK. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). When you draw a box to select components.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. then the Select a System dialog displays. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). you can place the cursor over a system component. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . and click to select it. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. press Tab to highlight the system. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors).

verify that Solutions is selected. 11 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. click Settings. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. or architectural components. structural beams. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select CHWR. enter 450. For Inset.9 In the Select a System dialog. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. It does not reference the architecture. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. 13 Click Cancel. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. select Perimeter. 10 Click OK. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. duct. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components.

click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. With each Tab. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. to display the path with thinner lines. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. 19 In the drawing area. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. the flow for each WSHP is 0. 17 Optionally.16 Click Finish Layout. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment.75 L/s. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. and press Tab 3 times.

notice that the Water Flow is 1. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.50 L/s. 23 Under Mechanical. 24 Press Esc. verify that the value for Flow is 1. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click OK. and click OK.75 L/s).50 L/s. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. under Mechanical. 22 Select the boiler. and access its instance properties. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler.

Logically. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. double-click Level 1 . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the Number of Elements is now 8. click Edit System.HVAC Plan . 31 Close the Level 1 plan view.Design. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). On the Options Bar. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 32 Click Finish Editing System.Design ➤ Floor Plans.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 28 In the Project Browser. 27 On the System Tools panel. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.

access its instance properties. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. note that the value for Flow is 4.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. as shown. Next.50 L/s. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . which propagates flow throughout the system. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.94 L/s. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. so the total flow of 6. you physically close the CHWR loop.44 L/s. under Mechanical. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. 38 Using the same method. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected.94 L/s. and click Cancel. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. 35 Using the drag control. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap.

NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. select Perimeter 1 of 5. select a WSHP. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS).00%. 41 Click OK. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. and then click OK. Click Settings. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. enter 0. For Slope. For Inset. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . select CHWS. enter 450. 40 In the Select a System dialog.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component.

as shown. 46 Click Modify. (Both sections are at the same elevation. 47 In the drawing area. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. In a later exercise. 48 While pressing Ctrl. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path.

as shown. or manually modify the pipe. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. Either relocate the system components. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). To create the piping system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. or offset elevations are incorrect. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. 52 Close the file with or without saving it.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. 50 Using the same method. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. select a different layout solution. 51 Click Finish Layout. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system.

click Training Files. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.HVAC Plan . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . and the return pipes are magenta. double-click 3D Building.Design ➤ 3D Views.Design is highlighted. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. As you work in the training file.

as shown.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 7 In the plan view. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. select the section of piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 6 Press Delete.

You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. Click to specify the reference point. select the boiler. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and press Esc to clear the selection.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Click to move the piping. 9 In the 3D view.

The connections are automatically created.11 In the Select Connector dialog. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. select the return pipe riser. 13 In the plan view. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 12 In the 3D view. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and the lower one is secondary. select the boiler. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). and click OK. and click Draw Pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps.

and press Enter. and you select 1 connector. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor down. enter 381. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. for Offset. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .In a plan view. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. enter 600. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.

NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 18 Press Esc twice. select the primary base mounted pump. and the appropriate fittings are created. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 19 In the plan view. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. As you place piping runs that are close together. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

and click the minus symbol. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom connector. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. you select the tee fitting. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and select it.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and click to draw the pipe.

click to connect to the pump.27 Move the cursor to the right. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and when the connector point displays.

zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .28 Press Esc. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. right-click the discharge connector. and click to create the pipe. select the primary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. 31 On the Options Bar. 29 If necessary. for Offset. enter 1200.

Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. these pipe connections were created automatically.33 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .

138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 35 Using the method learned previously. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom control on the tee.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. as shown. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view.

and press Enter. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown.■ Move the cursor down. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to create the pipe. enter 2850. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . type 300. for Offset.

Next.37 Click Modify. you validate the flow through the system. You now have a closed loop system. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

as shown. The flow is being propagated through the piping. under Mechanical.44 L/s.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. 48 In the plan view. 43 Press Esc.44 L/s). for Cooling Water Flow. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 40 Click Cancel. right-click. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. When you create the pumps in parallel. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 42 Click OK. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. view the properties for the secondary pump. right-click. which is rounded up to 3. 46 Press Esc. and click OK. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. the value is 0 L/s. under Mechanical. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. select the cooling tower. In the Instance Properties dialog. Connect the cooling tower Next. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 41 Using the same method. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that Flow is 6. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. and click Element Properties. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. notice that under Mechanical. 44 In the 3D view. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog.50 or 50% of the Flow. and click Element Properties.

■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). ■ Lower pipe (outlet). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

and close the dialog.44 L/s. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. 49 Press Esc. select the cooling tower. 50 In the 3D View. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 . NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m.Design is highlighted. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. When the valve is open. as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and is heated by the boiler.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.52 Close the file with or without saving it. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). click Training Files. the water bypasses the cooling tower. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. Adding Valves In this exercise. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.HVAC Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. Adding Valves | 145 . 8 Press Esc twice. and select M_Ball Valve . NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm.4 On the Options Bar. The bypass valve is closed by default. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.

10 Press Esc. 14 Using the same method. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. parallel to the previously placed valve. 12 Select M_Ball Valve .50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. place another M_Ball Valve . 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

18 In the Instance Properties dialog. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). and click OK.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. validate that the Flow is 6. right-click. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve.44 L/s. 19 Using the same method. and click Element Properties. Adding Valves | 147 . under Mechanical.

validate that the Flow is 6. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. 20 Select the bypass valve. and select M_Ball Valve . you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. Initially. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. and select M_Ball Valve . You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. 22 Using the method you just learned. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6.44 L/s. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. click Training Files. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode.44 L/s. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. In heating mode.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower).

5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. and click OK. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Sizing Pipe | 149 . This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK.Design is highlighted. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. select Pipe Color Fill . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Pipe Color Fill .Size.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. for Schemes. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. as shown.Flow. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan .

select Larger of Connector and Calculated.5 m/s.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. Click OK. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. Either relocate the system components. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select Friction. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. or offset elevations are incorrect. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Select And. or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and enter 220 Pa/m. and click to select the branch. and for Velocity. for Branch Sizing. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. 13 Press Esc. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. Under Constraints. select a different layout solution. enter 1.

Inspecting the System In this exercise. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. and double-click 3D Building. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow.Design ➤ 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level.rvt. pressure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Inspecting the System | 151 . you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system.14 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. Using the System Inspector. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately.

This information helps you modify the system design. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). and pressure information including pressure loss. as required. flow. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. An inspection flag reports the section number. as shown. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

Design ➤ Floor Plans. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog.7.1 Pa. and click OK. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. In this exercise. Warnings display. and to size pipe. inspect Section 6 again.rvt.4 Pa. 9 Using the same method.0 L/s. 10 Click Finish. and double-click Level 3 . and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834.Note that the Flow is 1. targeting those systems that need attention. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.Design. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Fluid Temperature. click Training Files. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. select 32° C. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems.HVAC Plan .3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. you need to validate them. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. the Static Pressure is 41916. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser.

the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. TIP If you have multiple views open. double-click Level 1 . you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. and confirm unassigned system components. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). 4 In the System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. As you learned when placing components. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). right-click Hydronic Return. In the System Browser. and click Expand All. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and select Level 3 . Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. For example. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. thus assigning the components to a system. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems.HVAC Plan . 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. click Close. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. 9 Right-click CHWS. and click Show to view all of the system components. After you assign components to a system. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. right-click the Systems titlebar. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. and click View. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system.Design floor plan. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. expand the Unassigned folder. 7 In the System Browser. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system.Design. 6 In the Project Browser. 10 Using the same methods.HVAC Plan . otherwise. After you have assigned all components to systems. If you place components without assigning them to a system. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. and for pipe sizing. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. the pipe is associated with that system. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. 12 In the System Browser.

confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 14 Using the methods that you learned.13 Right-click CHWR. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. Checking Piping Systems | 155 .

156 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 157 .

158 .

Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Define required lighting. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.

■ ■ ■ For Temperature. click (Open). For Factor. distribution systems.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. expand Wiring . For Temperature. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. For Material. select 90.rvt. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. select Wiring Types. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . enter THHN. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name.04. and demand factors that are applied in the design. You also add a wiring type. ■ ■ For Material. As you place components and create circuits. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. speeding up the design phase. click Training Files. Click OK. enter 1. select Copper. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. ■ Click New Correction Factor. wiring.Wire Sizes. select Copper. In this exercise you review electrical settings. Select Correction Factor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 70. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

select Power. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. select Distribution Systems. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. enter 1. select Steel. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. select 75. For Value.0. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Neutral Multiplier. Select Neutral Required. select 120. Click Split. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. enter 2000. For Maximum.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. For Conduit Type. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. select Hot Conductor Size. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. enter 240. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Demand Factors. enter 250. For Insulation. enter 220. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . enter 50. For Neutral Size. For L-L Voltage. For Phase. select 3. Under More Than. select 240. For Minimum. select Voltage Definitions. By specifying a range. enter 120/240. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. For L-G Voltage. enter 240. For Wires. select Single. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. For Max Size. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. select THHN. Click OK. select 10000 VA.

Lighting Plan. For Type of Parameter. enter Required Lighting Level. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Verify that Instance is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.Lighting group in the space element properties. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. click (Open). Click OK twice. such as offices. 5 In the drawing area. select Electrical. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. select Spaces. click Training Files. Later in the tutorial. under the Electrical . under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. and double-click Level 2 .Lighting.rvt. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. select Electrical . Under Categories. click Add. In this case the key style is the type of space and. select Illuminance. and conference rooms. For Discipline. For Group Parameter Under. restrooms. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . because the key is linked to your new project parameter.

9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. double-click Required Lighting Level. Click OK. under Electrical . 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. Select Schedule Keys. enter Space Lighting Requirements.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. enter Open Office. enter 485. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. under Available Fields. enter Lighting Levels. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. and click OK. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog.Lighting. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. select Spaces. and for Key Name. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. For Name. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

Select Blank Line. change the sort order back to the default setting. click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Sorting/Grouping. 22 Using the same method. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . 21 Click OK twice. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. Notice that as you enter the data.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. select Required Lighting Level. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.Lighting Plan. which is mapped to project units. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .

or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. the value input applies only to the selected space. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . click (Open). Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. for Lighting Levels.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. that Required Lighting Level is blank. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. 27 Click OK. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. Later in this exercise. under Identity Data. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. In this exercise. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.

00 lx. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.00 lx.00 lx. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. click Training Files.00. and press ENTER. click (Add Value) again. for Category. enter Required Lighting and click OK. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown.rvt. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . For Color. select Required Lighting Level. select Spaces. click (Duplicate). and click (Add Value) five times. then the new value will be 400 lx. For example.00. and click (Add Value). 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. Select the scheme for 500 lx. ■ Click OK. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. enter 900. for Name. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. verify the By Range is selected. Select the scheme for 450. and in the At Least column. enter 200. and press Enter. Select the scheme for At Least 20. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. enter 800. and press ENTER. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. Under Schemes. for Title. enter Required Lighting Levels. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. 00 lx still selected.

double-click Number. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Color Scheme. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. 13 Click Calculated Value. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . and double-click Level 2 . select Required Lighting. Level.Lighting CF. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. For Type. Click OK. select Illuminance.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and Required Lighting Level.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 8 In the drawing area. Average Estimated Illumination. select Spaces. For Discipline. For Name. select Spaces. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. enter Lighting Delta. Name. for Available Fields. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. select Electrical.

and click Browse. Select Blank Line. select Required Lighting Level. Click OK. for Test. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. Click Conditional Format. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Not Between. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. for Fields. select Lighting Delta. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. under Condition. For Value. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Average Estimated Illumination. select Red. press the spacebar. for Custom Colors. Click OK three times. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. Select Header. for Sort by. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. Click Background Color. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. click Browse. type a hyphen. On the Formatting tab. Click OK twice. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. select Level. for Formula.■ For Formula.

16 Close the file with or without saving it.The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 .

170 .

171 . you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. First. as you place lighting fixtures. power circuits. Then. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Use the System Browser to check your design. Create power loads. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Create a panel schedule. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components.

4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . select the color legend. 8 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. By using orange as the color for this range.Lighting CF view is open. select Orange. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Lighting Ceiling plan. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. for the Spaces Category. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Under Scheme Definition. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.rvt. select Average Estimated Illumination. In the Color dialog. 2 In the drawing area. click (Open). 7 In the Project Browser. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. You can create additional color schemes.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . for Basic Colors. Click OK. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. click Training Files. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK.

and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. which is the lowest value in the specified range. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. 13 Click the Level 2 . Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). zoom to space Library 219. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update.

19 Press ESC to end the command. the fixtures will move accordingly. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected.277V. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture.5 fc range is satisfied. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 20 Select the lighting fixture. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule.5 fc range. 18 Click to place the fixture. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan.the +/. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 162. In the Name dialog.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. scroll to view space space Library 219. for Apparent Load. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. ■ Under Electrical Loads. for Name enter and click OK.00 VA.

In the next exercise. select 463T5_S. specify 15000. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. Under Photometrics. enter . Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. Under Electrical. for Ballast Loss Factor. click Training Files. Under Photometrics. and Receptacles | 183 . ■ In the Initial Color dialog. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. ■ Under Photometrics.93. enter F15. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.rvt. click the value for Initial Color.85. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. click the value for Initial Intensity. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. Placing Switches. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. select Xenon and click OK. for Color Preset. 2 In the drawing area. 9 In space Library 219. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. In the Select File dialog. Click OK. enter . 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. click the value for Light Loss Factor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Under Photometrics. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.00 lm. select the top center fixture. click (Open). ■ Click Apply. for Type Mark. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. for Lamp. junction boxes. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. select Luminous Flux. and click OK.ies and click Open. Junction Boxes. you add switches. and receptacles to your design. select T5 [HO]. ■ Click OK twice. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP.

184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .277V.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared .3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 7 Click to place the switch. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.

rfa and click Open.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. Select M_Junction Boxes . 12 In the Load Family dialog. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. 9 Press ESC to end the command.NoLoad. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 185 . The element type M_Junction Boxes . Placing Switches.

Click OK twice. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Click Edit Type. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. In the Type Properties dialog. 15 Select the junction box. 21 In the drawing area. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. for Mark. NOTE When entering values. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 2750. zoom to space Library 219. enter JB-1NL. for Level 2 .Offset. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. Under Electrical. note the Number of Poles is 1. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . you can enter a space to separate the unit values.14 Press ESC to end the command.

Space Name. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. NOTE If necessary. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Junction Boxes. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Space Number. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Distribution System. 26 In the System Browser. 23 In the System Browser. right-click and click Column Settings. Select Load. and Receptacles | 187 . Select Size. and Voltage. Click OK. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Expand General. and Number of Elements. 24 For any column. Expand Electrical.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. Placing Switches.

27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 31 Close the System Browser. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard.

41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. and Receptacles | 189 . Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. select Copy and Multiple. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 40 On the Options Bar. move the cursor along the wall. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. and enter 3650 and press ENTER.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 38 Select the receptacle.

190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .42 Move the cursor down. 43 Press ESC to end the command. enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle.

47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. Placing Switches. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 191 .

Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.

Adding wiring to a project is optional. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m.Surface: 100A. and work toward the higher voltage.208V MCB . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 2 In the drawing area. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .rvt. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. click (Open). You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. click Training Files.equipment. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . zoom to the space Electrical 220.

16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Distribution System.480V MCB . #1 Pole Breakers. for Distribution System. For Panel Name. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 15 On the Options Bar. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Max.Loads. enter LP-2B. #1 Pole Breakers. For Panel Name. enter 20. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 14 Select the panelboard. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown.Loads. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. select 480/277 Wye. Click OK. for Max. 8 Select the panelboard. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. enter 20. enter PP-2B. 9 On the Options Bar. select 120/208 Wye. Click OK. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 23 In the Filter dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. and for Category. click Check None. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. which is the logical connection between the elements. Click OK. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. zoom to space Instruction 221. 20 In the drawing area.

25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way. 28 Press ESC to end the command. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 32 Press ESC. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Select the switch on the right.

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 38 Press ESC to end the command. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.35 Select the left three-way switch. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

and for Category. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. click Check None. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. enter 2. and create permanent wiring. Next you create circuits without showing wire. except without wire. Click OK. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. click (Open). 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 42 In the Filter dialog. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.Loads. select Wires. for Hot Conductors. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221.39 Using the same method. 2 In the drawing area. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. click Training Files.

12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Rating. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. and Voltage Drop are selected. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Click OK. right-click on the Systems heading. Expand Electrical. Distribution System. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. expand Power. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. and then expand circuit 1. Voltage. 13 In the System Browser. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 .4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. and verify that Load.

Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 With the junction box still selected. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. under Electrical. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. Click Tags. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 30 Close the System Browser. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. change the Voltage to 277V. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area.

35 Press ESC to end the command. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. click below the first one to place it. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 39 In the Type Properties dialog. For Circuit Number. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. select Break.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 40 Click OK twice. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. under Identity Data. Click OK. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. Click Yes. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. for Type Mark. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 47 In the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. click Edit Type. enter FR4. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label .

60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. click Check None. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Next you create a switch system. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. Click OK. and for Category. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. Click OK. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 57 In the Filter dialog. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m.rfa.rvt. 54 Select all of the tags. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 52 In the Save As dialog. for File Name. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. and click Apply. click Training Files. Click OK. enter a comma. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open). Click Save. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

2 In the drawing area. Creating a Switch System | 205 . zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. enter a. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. under Electrical Lighting. for Switch ID.

23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. enter b. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor.Lighting. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Click OK. for switch ID. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . under Electrical . 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.

Circuits are used for power. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. enter 2. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. and click Element Properties. under Electrical . The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 7 In space Electrical 220. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires.rvt. 2 In the drawing area. Creating Power Loads | 207 . 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.26 Close the file with or without saving it. and for Category. and data systems. lighting. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog.Loads. select Electrical Fixtures. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Click OK. for Hot Conductors. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select the PP-2B panel. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 4 In the Filter dialog. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. click (Open). 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel.

208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 19 Click OK. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Wiring. and click to select the circuit. and in the drawing area. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. and click Open.rfa.13 Select the wire again. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. and in the right pane.

Creating Power Loads | 209 . as shown. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 28 In the drawing area. 22 In space Electrical 220. in space Instruction 221. select the PP-2B panel. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. click the connector of the first receptacle. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. as shown. 29 In space Instruction 221. 26 Press Delete.

There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you balance the loads for your design.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. select panel LP-2B. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance.rvt. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 2 In the drawing area. 1-#12. enter 30A. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. 1-#10. Under Electrical-Loads. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . 6 Click OK. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Finally. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Scroll down. 1-#12. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. 1-#10. In the left pane of the Open dialog. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 3 In the Electrical space. click Rebalance Loads. zoom to space Electrical 220. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. click Open. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. for Rating. Click OK. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. the distribution is shifted. click Training Files. Had there been a greater imbalance. After re-balancing loads.

and click Finish Editing Circuit. under Electrical . 15 Select panel PP-2B. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. for Rating. enter 40A. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. select the transformer TP-2B. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 12 Select panel PP-2B. enter 25A. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 24 Click Select Panel. and click OK. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Loads. Next you create a panel schedule. and click OK. under Electrical . 17 Close the warning dialog.Loads. for Rating. 14 Close the warning dialog.

Select PP-2B. click Training Files.Panel Schedules. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. 6 In the Project Browser. 4 Close the report. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. expand Sheets (all). for Font Size. 5 In the Project Browser. Under Header Text. 10 Click OK twice. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open E601 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 5 mm. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. select Berlin Sans FB.rvt. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. The Panel Schedule Report displays. Under Body Text. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. click (Open). for Font Size. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 4 mm. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. under Other. for Font. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. select Bold and Italic.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. Under Header Text. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. Click OK. for Appearance. click Edit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection.

select space Lounge 212. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click (Open). 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area.rvt. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. In the System Browser. each with a load of 180VA. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. press TAB once. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Expand Unassigned. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. click Training Files. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m.

Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 20 On the Options Bar. In the System Browser. select MDP-1. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. under Warnings. 15 In the dialog. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Checking Your Design | 215 . expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. for Panel. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 17 In the drawing area. 16 Close the details dialog. 18 Select panel LP-2C. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. zoom to space Electrical 214.

216 .

217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

219 . you create a PVC pipe type.Sanitary.rvt. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. planning is critical to a successful design. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. 4 In the Name dialog. right-click PVC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.Design is open. 3 In the Type Properties dialog.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.Plumbing Plan . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . type PVC . and click Properties.Vent. click Duplicate.Design ➤ Floor Plans. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 . Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Adding a pipe size. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In this exercise. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. In this lesson. in addition to loading existing families.

12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. and click Main. select M_Tee Sanitary .DWV: Standard. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 21 In the right pane.000 mm. enter 10°. under Mechanical. For Offset. select Tee.rfa. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type.006 mm. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . and open Metric\M_Trap P . select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. 18 For System Type. 13 In the right panel. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 17 In the left pane. enter -1250. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. enter 46.293 mm.5 In the Type Properties dialog.PVC . 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.PVC . 26 Click OK. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. select Sanitary. Tee. for Nominal. 25 For Outside.DWV: Standard. In the Project Browser. PVC .Sch 40 . 24 For Inside Diameter.PVC . under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 10 On the Selection panel. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. for Material. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. Tap. enter 54. 15 For System Type. under Pipe Types.DWV. select Sanitary. 22 Click New Size.Vent is listed. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. select Plastic. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main.Sch 40 . verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. click Pipe Settings. 6 Click OK.Sch 40 . Cross. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. select None. click Training Files. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. select Branch. and click OK. click Modify. 27 For the new pipe size. enter 45.

including plumbing fixtures. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. and hot and cold water piping. 221 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. vent. Create the hot water system. Create the cold water system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. sanitary piping. Create the sanitary plumbing system. add a hot water heater.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

a toilet. select one of the components in the system. at the midpoint of the detail lines. as shown. and click OK. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. A preview of the piping layout displays.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. 16 In the Select a System dialog. The base is placed. for example. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . select Sanitary 107.

The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. for Solution Type. 23 For Pipe Type. enter -1225. select Intersections. and for Offset. select PVC . for Diameter. and click OK. 27 For Offset. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. for Slope. click Solutions. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. enter -350 mm. and click Settings.05%.Sanitary. 21 On Options Bar. select 100 mm. The default settings are automatically modified.Sanitary. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. and modify it to meet project requirements. enter -350 mm. You accept this suggested solution. select PVC . 26 For Pipe Type. 28 On the Options Bar. enter 1. 24 For Offset. 30 Click Modify. select Branch. 25 In the left pane. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .19 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Options Bar. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select Main.

and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical route path segments. 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

as shown. as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view.33 In the 3D view. 34 Click Modify. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main.

36 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . 37 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.

and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Overall. When a fitting is reversed. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain. select the fitting and click to reorient it.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . and check the slope control. as shown. adding sinks in the men’s room.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. you continue with the work from the last exercise. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise.

as shown.rvt. 5 On the Placement panel. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.Rectangular.Plumbing Plan . and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. in the Type Selector. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line.Public. and verify that Level 1 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). 4 On the Element panel. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Training Files. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Design ➤ Floor Plans. select 560 mmx560 mm .Design is open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . under M_Lavatory .

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . and press Enter to create a second sink. On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. 8 Select the sink.7 Click Modify. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point.2. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. enter 711.

select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 711. 15 Click the 3 sinks. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 11 In the System Browser. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.2. Press Esc. click Add To System. and press Enter to create the third sink. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 12 In the drawing area.

19 In the 3D view.16 On the Edit System panel. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. as shown.Design ➤ 3D Views. click Finish Editing System. under Design ➤ Plumbing . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 21 Select the tee. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. In the System Browser. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. double-click 3D Plumbing .Overall. use the ViewCube to orient the view. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. 20 Select the fitting.

enter 760 mm. with the tee fitting selected. press Spacebar. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 26 On the Options Bar.22 In the plan view. and click Apply. enter 1. When you press the Spacebar. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). for Slope. and click to draw the pipe. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. for Offset. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and click Draw Pipe. 24 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify.05%.

and when the vertical center line displays. 32 Select the double wye fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . click to place the fitting. move the cursor over the stub pipe.DWV.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 31 Click Modify.Sch 40 .PVC . under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . 29 In the Type Selector. select Standard. 30 In the 3D view. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.

and click Draw Pipe. In the next steps. right-click the right connector. on the Options Bar. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. double-click the section head to open the section view. you add pipe segments to the double wye. enter 305 mm. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. and press Enter. for Offset. enter 150 mm. 37 Select the fitting. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 36 In the section view. and press Enter. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 34 Press Esc. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right.33 With the fitting selected.

Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. as shown. 42 Click Modify. and click to place the pipe. 40 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 41 Using the same method. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered.

press Spacebar. enter 150 mm. right-click the bottom connector. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 48 Click Modify. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. 47 Move the cursor down. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 46 In the section view. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. and click Draw Pipe.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 49 Using the same method. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. and press Esc.

56 Using the same method.PVC . under M_Trap P . 54 Click Modify. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. select Standard.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 55 In the 3D view. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. select the P-Trap on the left.Sch 40 . 53 Using the same method. 51 In the Type Selector. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. 52 In the plan view.DWV.

57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and press Enter. and click Draw Pipe. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. 58 Using the same method. Click Modify. Select the double wye pipe on the left. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. select the left P-Trap.. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. In the plan view. Click in the plan view. connect the right sink to the double wye. enter 150 mm. Move the cursor to the left.

Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points.■ In the 3D view. click Finish to select the recommended solution. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . select the section of pipe you just drew. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. while pressing Ctrl. as shown. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. In the Type Selector. On the Routing Solutions panel. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. Press Esc. select PVC Sanitary. under Pipe Types. and select a proposed solution.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. 62 On the Options Bar. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. click Finish. adjusting the sanitary stack.05% is selected. and verify the slope.rvt. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. for Slope. verify that 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. You have appropriately sloped the pipe.

DWV.Design. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . select the elbow fitting on the right. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.PVC . 10 In the 3D view. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Sch 40 .Design.Floor level line. 7 On the Selection panel. and click the intersection to place the fitting. 3 In the Section view.Overall. select the vertical stack. right-click the top connector. select Standard. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. as shown. 9 In the Type Selector. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and click to draw the pipe. 5 Select the tee.Plumbing Plan . and click Draw Pipe.

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.43 In the 3D view.

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. You create a new pipe type. In this tutorial. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. 267 . click Training Files. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you can choose to save your work. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and click Duplicate. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. In this lesson.autodesk. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. After finishing each exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. If the tutorial training files are not present. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. However.rvt. 2 Right-click Standard.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. go to http://www. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.

You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. duct. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. under Mechanical. For Offset. and enter Fire Protection Wet. or architectural components. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. In the left pane. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. For Pipe Type. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. 6 In the Project Browser. you create project parameters and work with schedules. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. click Rename. In this exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that 2800 is selected. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. For Offset. select Carbon Steel. structural beams. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . In the next exercise. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 9 Click OK. However. and then click OK. select Main. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. For Pipe Type. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. for Material. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. verify that 2800 is specified. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. For System Type. Next. and click Properties. select Fire Protection Wet. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. For System Type. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. you modify the type properties of the pipe. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. select Fire Protection Wet.

click Training Files.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 5 Click OK twice. click Add. and then click OK. For Group parameter under. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Name. enter Sprinkler Zone. Under Categories. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . select space Instruction 221 as shown. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Using a crossing window. enter Zone 1. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. and click Element Properties. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 6 In the drawing area.rvt. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. the space crossing lines display. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. under Fire Protection. select Spaces. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. indicating that it’s the active view. select the upper half of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor.Design is highlighted. for Sprinkler Zone.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Fire Protection.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. right-click.

11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter Zone 2. select Zone 1. 10 In the Filter dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. verify that only Spaces are selected. and then click OK. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. and then access instance properties. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. to which you add various parameters. click Training Files. and click OK. and then click OK. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool.rvt. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. under Fire Protection. you create schedules for sprinkler design. including a calculated value parameter. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . under Fire Protection. 13 Using the same method. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Sprinkler Zone. for Sprinkler Zone.

6 Using the same method. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. double-click on each column separator. Select Schedule keys. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . 14 Select the new header. Click OK. For Units.Design is highlighted. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. indicating that it’s the active view. select Millimeters. select Maximum Spacing. Obstructed-Combustible. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. and on the ribbon. 9 On the Formatting tab. For Rounding. select 0 decimal places. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. for Name. Click OK. enter Protection Area Construction Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. select Spaces. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. and click Field Format. 7 Click OK. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Format dialog. select Fire Protection. enter Light. select Length. click Add Parameter. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. For Name. For Type of Parameter. The schedule displays.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. enter Maximum Spacing. click the Formatting tab. select mm. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. For Group parameter under. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 11 Click OK twice. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Key name. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Unit symbol. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .

Unobstructed Ordinary. enter Sprinkler Schedule. For Name.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and press Enter. enter 40. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Click OK. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. enter 4575. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Unobstructed Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. select Spaces.

Click OK. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. Enter the formula operator / after Area. and click Field Format. enter Minimum Sprinklers. select Fixed. and click OK. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). For Type. 19 Click the Formatting tab. select 0 decimal place. In the Fields dialog. select Number. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. For Rounding. under Available fields. For Discipline. For Formula. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 20 On the Formatting tab. select Area. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . select Minimum Sprinklers. click . 22 Click OK twice. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. For Units. select Common.

At the bottom of the dialog. ■ In the Format dialog. under Other. select Level. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. and click View Properties. select Sprinkler Zone. verify that Use default settings is selected. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Minimum Sprinklers. and select Totals only. select Number. select Level.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. and then click Field Format. select Sprinkler Zone. Under Field formatting. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. for Sort by. For Then by (second instance). For Fields. for Sorting/Grouping. click Edit. select Hidden field. 26 Click OK 3 times. and then select Hidden field. For Then by. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Select Header and Blank line. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Grand totals. For Fields. Select Header and Blank line.

click Edit. and click View Properties. and select Totals only. right-click the schedule. double-click Type. under Other. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. for Filter. select Level equals Level 2. select Grand totals. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. for Available fields. and click View Properties. and Count. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. for Fields. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. System Name. select Count. for Filter by. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. select Sprinklers. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Under Field formatting. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. select Embedded Schedule. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Embedded Schedule. 30 Click OK twice. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. delete the word Maximum.27 In the drawing area. On the Formatting tab. For Category. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. click Edit. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. select Calculate totals.

Unobstructed. 44 In the schedule. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. select space 221 Instruction. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 48 In the floor plan. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 46 With the space still selected. for Protection Area Construction Type. select Light. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Ordinary. 41 In the plan view. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. select Ordinary. and access the instance properties. Unobstructed.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser.Fire Protection Plan Design. under Identity Data. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. but their values are not determined. select space 221 Instruction. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. double-click FP . click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 52 Click OK. Unobstructed. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. 50 Access the instance properties. 43 Click Cancel. under Identity Data. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). As a result. and click OK. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Protection Area Construction Type. and the spacing parameter values are evident. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Identity Data. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family.rvt. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you can choose to save your work. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. However. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. As you place the sprinklers. By following the recommended workflow. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. As you create the system. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. If the tutorial training files are not present. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. methodology.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. 279 . You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you will understand the process. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. After finishing each exercise. At the end of this tutorial.autodesk. go to http://www. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click Level 2 . you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. click Training Files. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.

there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. After placing the initial sprinkler. When there is a small misalignment. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. 3 In the Project Browser. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. When this happens. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view.

Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. 11 In the drawing area. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 9 In space Instruction 202. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. verify that Constrain is cleared. 206. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Also. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. while pressing Ctrl. and that Copy and Multiple are selected.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and click to place 3 sprinklers. and 207. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. select the sprinklers that you placed. 10 Press Esc twice.

and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Design. 18 Type WT.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 17 In the Project Browser. as shown. 200B.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . specify a vertical offset. open Design ➤ FP . and 200C). you place non-hosted sprinklers.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. Next. you place non-hosted sprinklers. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. and then press Esc. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section.

In this exercise. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. In the next exercise. and click Element Properties. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. For Number. and press Enter. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. for Offset. enter 4100. After creating the logical connection. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 29 Press Esc. Next. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping.FP_Ceiling view. This number is determined in the schedule. enter 11.0. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . you adjust the offset. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. enter 2900 mm. and with piping (physical connection). 22 In the 200A Corridor space. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. move the cursor to the right.19 In the floor plan. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Notice that the schedule updates. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. 25 Click OK. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. under Constraints.

and select Piping. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. As you assign sprinklers to systems. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Unlike logical connections (systems). In the left pane of the Open dialog. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping.Design is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files.rvt.Fire Protection Plan . IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. 5 Right-click the header. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. However. click View ➤ Systems. as shown. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder.

within the Piping Systems folder. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. indicating the logical connection. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. select an initial piping layout. press Tab. named Fire Protection Wet. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. 11 With the system still selected. and click Select. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. Next.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. In the System Browser. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. Creating a Piping System | 285 . 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. place the cursor over a sprinkler. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. and select the system.

and number of elements in the system.0 is specified. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. and a piping layout preview displays. 22 On the Options Bar. providing system editing tools. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. as shown. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. 19 Click OK. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. When the layout is finished. 15 In the drawing area. for System Name. and on the Options Bar. verify that Main is selected. 23 For Offset. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. select Branch. enter FP Wet_Zone2. In the left pane. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select 150 mm. click Place Base. The Generate Layout tools are activated. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. click Settings. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 14 Click Finish Editing System. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. For Offset. system equipment. 12 On the Options Bar.The Edit Piping System panel displays. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 13 In the System Browser. verify that 2800. For Pipe Type. for Diameter. click Solutions. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. enter -3650. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2.Wet is selected.

and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. A (parallel movement control) displays. In general. and green represents branch lines). The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. verify that Network is selected. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. click Modify. Creating a Piping System | 287 . Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. and select solution 4. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. On the Generate Layout panel.

IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. Either relocate the system components. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP .28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. as shown. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. select a different layout solution. or manually modify the pipe. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. 29 Click Finish Layout. or that offset elevations are incorrect. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 32 If necessary. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created.

3 If necessary. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool.33 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in. click Training Files. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise.Fire Protection Piping Plan . and various manual pipe creation tools. and select the elbow fitting as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system.Design is highlighted. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then you create piping to physically connect them. Next. the Connect Into tool.

The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). air terminals. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. and so on) are logically connected by a system. click Finish Editing System. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection).4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you can select the pipe or duct. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 9 On the Edit System panel. or a system component to display system tools. radiators. mechanical equipment. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 5 In the drawing area. click Add To System. 8 In the corridor. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. and pipe or duct is created.

and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 13 Click Finish Layout. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . for Solution Type.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. verify that Network is selected. and then tile the views. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. verify that Solutions is selected. 12 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Piping Plan. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area.11 On the Generate Layout panel. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 18 Click Finish Editing System. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. and select solution 5. 14 Close the System Browser. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor.

28 In the drawing area.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc. 27 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the sprinkler. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe.24 In the Piping Plan. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 29 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe. select 2800. for Offset. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . right-click.

rvt. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Scale. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 .Design is highlighted. 31 In the plan view. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. select 1 : 50. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. Because the whole system highlights. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system.Fire Protection Piping Plan .Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 4 On the Options Bar.

Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.6 Press Esc. 8 Right-click. and click View Properties. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . double-click on the section head to open the section view.

and click Draw Pipe. select MEP Section. 14 Select the tee fitting.Design. enter FP Section_Stair. select Design. and click Apply Default View Template. 12 If necessary. select FP . For View Classification. and press Enter. 22 In the drawing area. Under Identity Data.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 Select the elbow fitting. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. for Sub-Discipline. enter 2135. right-click Design ➤ FP . and then right-click the top connector. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. drag the top section boundary line up. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee.Design the active view. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . 17 Move the cursor up. For Default View Template. 19 Make Level 2 . for View Name. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . Click OK. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 10 In the Project Browser. 15 Press Spacebar.Fire Protection Plan . and then click Modify.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair.

27 On the Placement Tools panel. 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 26 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. for Diameter. select . 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). 25 Verify that Fire Protection . zoom to the hose reel cabinet. and then click Modify.Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. verify that Automatically Connect is active. 24 Select the cabinet.23 In the section view.

verify that M_Gate Valve . Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 .50 mm is selected. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog.29 Close the section view.rfa. and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector. as shown. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. and then click Modify. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. 32 In the Open dialog. click Yes to load a family. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet.

3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .rvt. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.Design ➤ 3D Views. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. click Training Files.35 Open 3D Fire Protection.

All selected piping is now 1" diameter. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. select 25mm. 6 In the Filter dialog. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. for Diameter.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. height. width. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . or width. width. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. Changing the diameter. 8 Click Modify. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. click Check None. 4 In the floor plan view. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

and after each segment highlights. .Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. By hiding the linked file. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Clear Leader.rfa. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. Press Esc. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 17 On the View Control Bar. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). and click Open. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. 12 If necessary. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 18 In the 3D view. click to place the tag. select the linked architectural file. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. NOTE Tags are view specific.

The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . and when the section highlights. press Tab. 21 On the Options Bar. select 100mm. for Diameter.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment.

for Diameter. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. and then tag the piping as shown. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. The pipe diameter is modified. select 40mm. 25 On the Options Bar. and maximize the floor plan. as shown.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 24 In the drawing area. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 23 Close the 3D view. 26 Using the same method.

allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. you created a wet fire protection system. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. You added tags to pipes. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. For additional practice. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. In this tutorial.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. In this exercise. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m.

304 .

create details. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. add annotations and dimensions. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. 305 .Documenting a Project In this tutorial.

306 .

under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Rename. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. dependent views. and click OK. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. and apply a view template. click Training Files. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Properties. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 307 . matchlines. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. If the view included detail graphics. and view references. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser.

3 In the Rename View dialog. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. and then press Esc.rvt. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 9 Click OK. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. more focused. 10 In the drawing area. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 7 Close the file without saving. create dependent views for areas B and C. and click Apply Default View Template. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. as shown. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. and click Rename. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. views and put them on the sheet. 4 Using the same method. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. click Training Files. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. and click OK. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels.

select Double Dash . In the Color dialog. For Line Pattern. 13 Press Esc twice. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. and then press Esc. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. click the current value. For Line Weight. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. Click OK. and click OK. select 11.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. select black. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. 19 In the drawing area. 14 Click Finish Matchline. Creating Dependent Views | 309 .

apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 21 Using the same method. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline.20 Select the upper view reference and. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . for Target view. as shown. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 25 Using the same method. on the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries.

5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select Plumbing Isometric. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in. and click Properties. 27 Using the same method. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . For Default View Template. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 4 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. right-click 3D Plumbing. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Domestic Water. enter Plumbing Isometric .rvt. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. and select the section box. and zoom to each of the view references. for View Name. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water.

The selected piping displays as a dashed line. and then click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. select Documentation. For Sub-Discipline. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. Click Apply. select Plumbing. right-click Plumbing Isometric .■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Dash. for View Classification. The section crop lines no longer display. select 3. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. Click OK. and click to select it. 10 Right-click. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. For Pattern.Domestic Water. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. press Tab 3 times. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm. and click to select it. 13 Using the same method.

15 Right-click. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view.14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. as shown). 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. and click to select it. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.

and in the Type Selector. and in the view properties. 19 Using methods learned previously. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 .Sanitary Waste. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. verify that Common is selected. and for Default View Template. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label.Isometric. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. specify Plumbing . rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . Click in the drawing area to start a text label.5mm Arial. select 1. For Slope. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. On the View Control Bar. click on the Format value. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping.16 Press Esc.

26 Press Esc twice. click Training Files. as shown.rvt. When the view is associated with a sheet. 22 Click OK twice. for Rounding. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click to place the spot slope annotation. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. and then place the callout view on a sheet.■ In the Format dialog. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. you use a plan view to create a callout view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. indicating that it’s the active view. select To the nearest 10. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it.

5 On the Options Bar. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. select 1 : 50. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). for Scale. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. Creating Callout Views | 317 .

Expand the Callout Boundary category and.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select 5. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. Click OK. double-click M601 . using the same method. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. for Line Weight. under Sheets (all). Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. 13 In the Project Browser. drag it to the sheet. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and select the viewport.

select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. for View Name. 17 In the Project Browser. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. enter WSHP PART PLAN. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. For Title on Sheet. right-click the callout view. For Default View Template.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. and click Apply Default View Template. Creating Callout Views | 319 . Click OK.

21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown.

select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . under Names. and click OK. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. right-click the detail view.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. Creating Callout Views | 321 . 25 In the Project Browser. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. enter Typical WSHP Detail. and click Rename. 26 In the Rename View dialog. and click Apply View Template. and click OK.

322 .

click Training Files. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. linetypes. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. and annotation to create a legend.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. as shown. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. Creating Annotations In this exercise. work with model-based components. duct tags. symbols. 323 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures.

3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 8 With the text still selected. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 9 Press Esc twice. and select 1. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.

16 In the drawing area. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. and then click Right Straight. and a segment of rectangular duct. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. a segment of round duct. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. verify that Leader is cleared. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. a return diffuser. as shown. select a supply diffuser. 15 On the Options Bar.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. Creating Annotations | 325 . 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight.

23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 20 In the Tags dialog. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. and click Open. for Ducts. If necessary.rfa. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct.17 Click Modify. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. under Category. and click OK. 21 In the Load Family dialog. 25 In the drawing area. as shown. 22 In the Tags dialog. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 24 On the Options Bar. click Load. clear Leader.

Creating Annotations | 327 . select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 32 In the drawing area. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. Leader.26 On the Options Bar. select Horizontal. 31 On the Options Bar. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then press Esc. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. and Attached End.

36 Press Esc twice. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. 34 In the drawing area. as shown. select Free End. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .33 On the Options Bar. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. for Leader.

tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 37 In the drawing area.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Creating Dimensions | 329 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. you use temporary dimensions to locate. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. for Leader Arrowhead. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. lay out. click Training Files. and all elements of that type are affected. select the last tag placed. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. 40 Using the method learned previously. and lock lighting fixtures. and click OK. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. That’s because you changed a type property. not simply an instance property.

5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. On the Options Bar. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. and then select the interior face of the wall. 12 Click EQ. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 14 Using the same method. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 13 Press Esc. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. select the dimension line. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines.

linework. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating a Legend In this exercise. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. annotation symbols. click Training Files. Creating a Legend | 331 . enter 2430. 17 Press Esc. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures.9). 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and notes. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. and offset them from the wall. 19 Select the dimension value (3376.rvt. Because the dimensions are locked. click the 3 interior locks on the line. 20 Using the same methods. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. and press Enter.

200 Neck. Click OK.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . 10 Using the same method. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . enter Diffuser Legend. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. For View. and select 1. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Scale. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click below the title to place the diffuser. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. select 1 : 50. select Floor Plan.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 5 Click in the drawing area.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 1. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. click next to the top diffuser. 14 In the drawing area.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Creating a Legend | 333 .11 Press Esc.

28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 26 Press Esc. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. and then press Esc. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .DROP and its text note. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 21 Press Esc. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. The selected detail lines are now thin. 24 Select the component’s break line. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 27 While pressing Ctrl.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point.

enter E.30 Select Spot Elevation . Creating a Legend | 335 . 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. and then click Modify. 35 Change the text on the right to N.MECHANICAL LEGEND. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 34 Using the method learned previously. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . and then click Modify.

and select Title w Line . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Press Esc.39 With the viewport still selected. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.

click Training Files. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. detail groups. A drafting view using detail components. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. 337 . 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . and text.113 East elevation view. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. A detail callout that references another view. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise.Detailing 15 In this lesson.

Next. 8 Using the same method. 5 In the drawing area.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click to place it. and then modify and align the views. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.113 East on the sheet. 7 Drag the Power Riser . select each of the 2 panelboards. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. place Power Riser . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 4 On the Options Bar. clear Leader.

10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. 12 Select the Level 1 line. and click Deactivate View. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. giving the appearance of a single view. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. under Identity Data. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . for Title on Sheet. and click Activate View. 13 Right-click. right-click. and click OK. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. select the 113 North view. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view.9 Press Esc.

No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. 21 Using the drag control. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and click Activate View. 19 Select the Level 1 line. In the next exercise. you add wiring to the diagram. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. right-click. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. and select Title w Line . 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 22 Press Esc.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. as shown. select the 113 East elevation view. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.

6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. enter Electrical Power. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. click Training Files. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. In the New Subcategory dialog. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. notice that there are no snaps active. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . for Name. 9 Beginning at the transformer. click New.rvt. 8 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. expand Lines. Under Modify Subcategories. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. select 6. As you draw. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. indicating that it’s the active view.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.113 North view. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. for Line Weight. and then click OK. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 2 Close the Project Browser. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. verify that Chain is selected. In the Line Styles dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK.

for Offset. as shown. 11 Using the same method. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. enter 3mm. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard.10 Press Esc.

18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . you select the portion of the line that you want to keep.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. so that the result is as shown.

24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.

select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 29 Click Modify. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . and select 1. 33 On the Options Bar. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 28 Click above the cap. 31 While pressing Ctrl. select Multiple.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.

346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 36 Press Esc.

37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. click on the length dimension value. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. and press Enter. you can ensure that they stay together. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. enter 7. 39 Move the cursor to the right. You enter exact values for each line length. enter 3. 40 Press Esc. change the length of the bottom line to 3. Using the same method. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line.0. Press Esc.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. enter 12. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 42 On the Options Bar. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. for Offset. and then press Esc. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . and press Enter.

and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 52 Select the detail group. 54 Select the group. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 46 In the Project Browser. 51 Using the method learned previously. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. TP-2B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and then press Esc. 50 With the group selected. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. while pressing Ctrl. and click OK. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. select all 3 lines. enter Ground. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 47 In the drawing area. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. for Name.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. In later exercises.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. and will place it on sheet E01. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.

3 Select the section box. and click OK. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . 6 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. click Home. and double click Typical Make Up Air. and click Apply View Template.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). 7 Right-click the ViewCube. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and then press Esc. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. 5 Right-click the copy. Back. Walkthroughs. and then click the corner where the Top. for Name. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser.rvt. 2 Zoom in to view the section. and Left sides converge. 8 On the ViewCube. click Training Files. select 3D Views. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type.

15 Using the same method. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Typical. and click to specify the second leader point. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Move the cursor down and to the left. select 3D HVAC Iso. Click OK. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected.■ ■ Under Names.

as shown. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. and then click OK. To rotate and reposition a text label. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.18 Press Esc. and under Extents. 19 Complete the text labels. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. as shown. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. under Extents. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. select Crop Region Visible. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 23 Click on the crop region. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet.25 Click OK. Place a detail component. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. and click Activate View. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. 32 In the Instance Properties. click Training Files. 33 Right-click the view. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. Use detail lines to create a detail group.rvt. and click View Properties. select Crop View and Section Box. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. 29 Right click the view. clear Crop Region Visible. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. scroll down. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 30 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. and under Extents. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Deactivate View. Drafting Detail Components | 353 .

The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 12 On the Element panel. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). select 1 : 5. click the point at the top of the drain. select Plumbing. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. Click OK. right-click the view name. 9 Zoom in to the component. as shown. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. select Documentation. Click OK. for Sub-Discipline. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. as the rectangle start point. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. 3 In the Project Browser. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . For View Classification. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. For Scale. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. and click Properties. 13 In the drawing area. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.

and click OK. for Type. 21 In the drawing area.P. Concrete.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 20 Select 1. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. select C. 18 With the filled region still selected. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 22 Click Modify.I. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. and then press Esc.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. Drafting Detail Components | 355 .

Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Multiple. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and then click to select them. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 23 In the drawing area. 28 Click Modify. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. select the filled region. 34 Press Esc. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. (Line). 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 31 On the Options Bar.

40 Click Finish Region. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. and then press Esc. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab.

(Rectangle). draw wide detail lines as shown. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. enter Flashing Membrane_F.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. press Tab to highlight the chain. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. as shown. 52 In the Create Group dialog. select the Flashing Membrane group. 49 Click Modify. and click OK. 45 Using the method learned previously. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area.. and then click to select them.D. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. for Name. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.

61 Using the same method. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . press Spacebar twice. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. as shown. 55 Press Esc. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. as shown. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.

65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. select Leader and Free End. 67 On the Options Bar. and use the grips to resize the masking region. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 64 Press Esc twice. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. as shown. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown.62 Press Esc twice.

75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 78 Move the cursor to the left. 81 Select the text note. 72 If necessary. and click to specify the text insertion point. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. and click to specify the second leader point. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. and then click OK. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 71 Click Modify. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 76 To select the leader start point.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. select 15000 (Division 15 . 80 Press Esc twice.70 In the Keynotes dialog. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150.

362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. as shown. 84 Using the following image as a guide.82 Continue annotating the detail.

open P103 .Plumbing Part Plans & Details. select the view title. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . and click to place it. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 90 Press Esc. and then press Esc twice. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 88 In the drawing area.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful